1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2321–2342 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

80×150 Manufacturing Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 manufacturing facility packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Manufacturers running CNC, fabrication, or assembly lines need column-free.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 manufacturing facility packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, fabrication, or assembly lines need column-free floor space and high eaves for overhead cranes.

💡 Pro tip:Engineered Drawings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 manufacturing facility cost?

A 80×150 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

80×150 Manufacturing Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

80×150 Aircraft Hangar

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×150 aircraft hangar packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Pilots and FBOs use the 80×150 as a multi-aircraft hangar, fits a King Air 350.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 70′ Bifold Door
  • 20′ Eave
  • Hurricane Cert Avail.
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 80ft width. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×150 aircraft hangar packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Pilots and FBOs use the 80×150 as a multi-aircraft hangar, fits a King Air 350 alongside two single-engine pistons, or four mid-size singles in a row.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Compliant Design. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 80×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

80×150 Aircraft Hangar

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

80×150 Cold Storage Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 cold storage building packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and ag-industrial operators build out the 80×150 as cold.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Walls
  • Spray Foam Roof
  • Vapor Barrier
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 cold storage building packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Food distributors and ag-industrial operators build out the 80×150 as cold storage with insulated metal panels and a vapor-sealed envelope.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 cold storage building cost?

A 80×150 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 cold storage building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

80×150 Cold Storage Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure with open equipment bays sheltering a tractor, truck and baler near mountains

80×150 Equipment Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $220,300

12

80×150 Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 80×150 equipment barn? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Row-crop farmers park combines, sprayers, planters, and a service tractor side-by-side in 9,12000 sq.

You’re viewing:Equipment Barn·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$176,350
80×150
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Open-Gable Ends
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-EQUIPMENT-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Looking for a 80×150 equipment barn? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Row-crop farmers park combines, sprayers, planters, and a service tractor side-by-side in 9,12000 sq ft with room for fuel and a parts bench.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install Included.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment barn
Everyday equipment barn
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment barn + seasonal storage
equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 equipment barn cost?

A 80×150 equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 equipment barn?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 80×150 equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure with open equipment bays sheltering a tractor, truck and baler near mountains

80×150 Equipment Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $219,650

12

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$250,400$219,650SAVE $30,750
or $4576/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 80×150 indoor riding arena? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Trainers and breeding operations build 80×150 as a regulation-friendly riding arena, 80′.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$219,650$250,400Save $30,750
or as low as $4576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$175,700
80×150
this size
$219,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • 6′ Kickwall Wainscot
  • Skylight Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Looking for a 80×150 indoor riding arena? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Trainers and breeding operations build 80×150 as a regulation-friendly riding arena, 80′ is the standard width for dressage and reining work, and 120′ gives a full lengthening lane.

💡 Pro tip:Vertical Roof.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 80×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $219,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4576/month on a 80×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×150 indoor riding arena for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor riding arena to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$219,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$219,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

80×150 Commercial Workshop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Commercial Workshop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 commercial workshop packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Heavy-equipment dealers and fleet operators use the 80×150 as a 10-bay service.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 10 Service Bays
  • 20′ Eave
  • 12×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 commercial workshop packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Heavy-equipment dealers and fleet operators use the 80×150 as a 10-bay service workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Slab Spec. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 80×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 commercial workshop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 commercial workshop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

80×150 Commercial Workshop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

80×150 Industrial Steel Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Industrial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Industrial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Industrial Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Industrial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space. 9,12000 sq ft of clear span gets subdivided later with interior partitions, bays, offices, restrooms, parts storage. Future-proof with.

You’re viewing:Industrial Steel Building·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Flex Layout
  • Framed Openings
  • Partition-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-INDUSTRIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your industrial steel building layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. 80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · industrial steel building layout

Industrial Steel Building layout.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space. 9,12000 sq ft of clear span gets subdivided later with interior partitions, bays, offices, restrooms, parts storage. Future-proof with framed openings on every wall.

💡 Pro tip:Custom-Engineered.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Industrial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Industrial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Industrial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Industrial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday industrial steel building
Everyday industrial steel building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a industrial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindustrial steel building + seasonal storage
industrial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Industrial Steel Building, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 industrial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Industrial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Industrial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Industrial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Industrial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Industrial Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Industrial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 industrial steel building cost?

A 80×150 industrial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 industrial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud industrial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 industrial steel building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud industrial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 industrial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 industrial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 industrial steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 industrial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 industrial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 industrial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 industrial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Industrial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

80×150 Industrial Steel Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Shop House / Barndominium

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium, engineered for code-compliant business use.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant shop house / barndominium space. The 80′-wide clear span gives the residence side full-height vaulted ceilings if you want them, with R-19 batt insulation throughout.

You’re viewing:Shop House / Barndominium·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Hybrid Layout
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-SHOP-HOUSE-BARNDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. 80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant shop house / barndominium space.

Bedroom(s)GREAT ROOM / KITCHENBath / Mech80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. The 80′-wide clear span gives the residence side full-height vaulted ceilings if you want them, with R-19 batt insulation throughout.

💡 Pro tip:Residential-Grade Finish.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Shop House / Barndominium.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Shop House / Barndominium spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Shop House / Barndominium.

DAILY USEEveryday shop house / barndominium
Everyday shop house / barndominium
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a shop house / barndominium.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshop house / barndominium + seasonal storage
shop house / barndominium + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 shop house / barndominium is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Shop House / Barndominium shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Shop House / Barndominium · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Shop House / Barndominium also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Shop House / Barndominium questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 shop house / barndominium cost?

A 80×150 shop house / barndominium from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 shop house / barndominium price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud shop house / barndominium ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 shop house / barndominium?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud shop house / barndominium different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 shop house / barndominium need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 shop house / barndominium delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 shop house / barndominium without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 shop house / barndominium.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 shop house / barndominium?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 shop house / barndominium in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 shop house / barndominium meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Shop House / Barndominium quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn | Steel and Stud, From $220,300

12

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Hay & Grain Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 80×150 hay & grain barn fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Ag-industrial operators stack large rounds 4-high under a 16′-20′ eave, with.

You’re viewing:Hay & Grain Barn·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$176,350
80×150
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Bay Design
  • 20′ Stack Height
  • Sliding End Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-HAY-GRAIN-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Our 80×150 hay & grain barn fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Ag-industrial operators stack large rounds 4-high under a 16′-20′ eave, with center-aisle access for skid-steer feeding.

💡 Pro tip:Ventilated Gables.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Grain Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Grain Barn spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Grain Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & grain barn
Everyday hay & grain barn
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & grain barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & grain barn + seasonal storage
hay & grain barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 hay & grain barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Grain Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Grain Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Grain Barn also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Grain Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 hay & grain barn cost?

A 80×150 hay & grain barn from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 hay & grain barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & grain barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 hay & grain barn?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & grain barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 hay & grain barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 hay & grain barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 hay & grain barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 80×150 hay & grain barn.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 hay & grain barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 hay & grain barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 hay & grain barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Grain Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

80×150 Fabrication Shop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Fabrication Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 80×150 fabrication shop fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Metal fabricators and welding shops need crane runways, high eaves, and reinforced framing.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane Rail Mounts
  • Reinforced Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 80×150 fabrication shop fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Metal fabricators and welding shops need crane runways, high eaves, and reinforced framing for overhead loads.

💡 Pro tip:5-10 Ton Crane Spec. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 fabrication shop cost?

A 80×150 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 fabrication shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

80×150 Fabrication Shop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. 8,6400 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

8 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

8 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

8 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 8 vehicles + full hobby shop. 8,6400 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

80×80 Manufacturing Floor

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $119,400

12

80×80 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$136,100$119,400SAVE $16,700
or $2488/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 80×80 manufacturing floor fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Column-free 8,6400 sq ft production floor for CNC equipment, fabrication, assembly.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,400$136,100Save $16,700
or as low as $2488/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $56,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 80×80 manufacturing floor fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Column-free 8,6400 sq ft production floor for CNC equipment, fabrication, assembly lines, conveyors, robotic cells, pallet staging, and light industrial workflows.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2488/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2488/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 manufacturing floor cost?

A 80×80 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $119,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2488/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2488/month on a 80×80 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×80 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

80×80 Manufacturing Floor

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

80×80 Distribution Hub

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Distribution Hub | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 Distribution Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Distribution Hub

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Distribution Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×80 distribution hub packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay.

You’re viewing:Distribution Hub·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-DISTRIBUTION-HUBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×80 distribution hub packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~128 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Mid-size logistics layout with dock-leveler-ready openings, drive-through bay options, staging space, and forklift-friendly clear height for pallet racking and inventory movement.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Distribution Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Hub spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution hub
Everyday distribution hub
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution hub + seasonal storage
distribution hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Distribution Hub, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 distribution hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Distribution Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Distribution Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Hub also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 distribution hub cost?

A 80×80 distribution hub from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 distribution hub price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 distribution hub?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 distribution hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 distribution hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 distribution hub without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 distribution hub.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 distribution hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 distribution hub in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 distribution hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

80×80 Distribution Hub

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber commercial metal building supply store with large windows, stone base, and autumn hillside

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Commercial Showroom / Retail

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 80×80 commercial showroom / retail fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,6400 sq ft of.

You’re viewing:Commercial Showroom / Retail·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Storefront Glazing
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-COMMERCIAL-SHOWRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Our 80×80 commercial showroom / retail fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~3840 sf showroom, 1920 sf stock. Vehicle, equipment, RV, boat, or building-material showroom with 8,6400 sq ft of customer-facing floor space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Showroom / Retail.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Showroom / Retail spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Showroom / Retail.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial showroom / retail
Everyday commercial showroom / retail
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial showroom / retail.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
commercial showroom / retail + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 commercial showroom / retail is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Showroom / Retail shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Showroom / Retail · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Showroom / Retail also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Showroom / Retail questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail cost?

A 80×80 commercial showroom / retail from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 commercial showroom / retail price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial showroom / retail different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 commercial showroom / retail.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 commercial showroom / retail?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 commercial showroom / retail in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 commercial showroom / retail meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Showroom / Retail quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber commercial metal building supply store with large windows, stone base, and autumn hillside

80×80 Commercial Showroom / Retail

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with tall open bay revealing an RV and boat near a lake

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

80×80 delivers 6400 sq ft of code-compliant rv / boat dealership inventory space. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. 80×80 delivers 6400 sq ft of code-compliant rv / boat dealership inventory space.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with tall open bay revealing an RV and boat near a lake

80×80 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit training facility at sunset with young athletes carrying gym bags

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud, From $117,150

12

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$133,550$117,150SAVE $16,400
or $2441/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

80×80 delivers 6400 sq ft of hobby-ready athletic facility / indoor sports space.

You’re viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$117,150$133,550Save $16,400
or as low as $2441/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$117,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. 80×80 delivers 6400 sq ft of hobby-ready athletic facility / indoor sports space.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear.

💡 Pro tip:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2441/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2441/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $117,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2441/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2441/month on a 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$117,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit training facility at sunset with young athletes carrying gym bags

80×80 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$117,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $117,800

12

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$134,300$117,800SAVE $16,500
or $2454/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Agricultural Processing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 80×80 agricultural processing facility? At 6400 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$117,800$134,300Save $16,500
or as low as $2454/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$117,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural processing facility layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Looking for a 80×80 agricultural processing facility? At 6400 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · agricultural processing facility layout

Agricultural Processing Facility layout.

Looking for a 80×80 agricultural processing facility? At 6400 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Processing Facility at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2454/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2454/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×80 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $117,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2454/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2454/month on a 80×80 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$117,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

80×80 Agricultural Processing Facility

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$117,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Trucking Terminal

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Trucking Terminal

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×80 trucking terminal packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready.

You’re viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your trucking terminal layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×80 trucking terminal packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · trucking terminal layout

Trucking Terminal layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×80 trucking terminal packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

💡 Pro tip:Trucking Terminal at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Trucking Terminal, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×80 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 trucking terminal price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Trucking Terminal

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $119,400

12

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$136,100$119,400SAVE $16,700
or $2488/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Warehouse / Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage? At 6400 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

You’re viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,400$136,100Save $16,700
or as low as $2488/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Looking for a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage? At 6400 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~128 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2488/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2488/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $119,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2488/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2488/month on a 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×80 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

80×80 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud, From $119,100

12

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,750$119,100SAVE $16,650
or $2481/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Municipal / Government Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 80×80 municipal / government facility packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks.

You’re viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,100$135,750Save $16,650
or as low as $2481/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Options
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal / government facility layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 80×80 municipal / government facility packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · municipal / government facility layout

Municipal / Government Facility layout.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 80×80 municipal / government facility packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Municipal / Government Facility at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2481/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2481/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 municipal / government facility cost?

A 80×80 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $119,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2481/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 municipal / government facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2481/month on a 80×80 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

80×80 Municipal / Government Facility

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $117,800

12

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$134,300$117,800SAVE $16,500
or $2454/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 80×80 indoor riding arena packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Mid-size indoor arena or equestrian training building with high clearance, kickwall-ready layout.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$117,800$134,300Save $16,500
or as low as $2454/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$117,800
80×120
longer
$176,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 80×80 indoor riding arena packs 6400 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Court / FieldSIDELINE / BENCHEquipment storage80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Mid-size indoor arena or equestrian training building with high clearance, kickwall-ready layout, ventilation, tack-room options, and lean-to additions for stalls or equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Riding Arena at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2454/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2454/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 indoor riding arena cost?

A 80×80 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $117,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2454/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2454/month on a 80×80 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$117,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

80×80 Indoor Riding Arena

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$117,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel structure in sandstone buff with clerestory windows and double door entry

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $119,100

12

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,750$119,100SAVE $16,650
or $2481/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. 8,6400 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship.

You’re viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,100$135,750Save $16,650
or as low as $2481/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Our 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~640 in main sanctuary. 8,6400 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2481/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2481/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $119,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2481/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2481/month on a 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel structure in sandstone buff with clerestory windows and double door entry

80×80 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart